Fiat - 500 - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015 (2)

2015 FIAT 500 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 15FF500-126-AD Fourth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are maintaining its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FCA US This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisLLC customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .18 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Auto Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .73 ▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authotransmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can key, simply push the mechanical key release button. be used to order duplicate keys. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). 2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. Mechanical Key Release Button 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY® CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also Replacement Keys considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring problem with the electronics. all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. CAUTION! • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer. General Information The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitRemote Keyless Entry Transmitter ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked the vehicle to activate the system. with metal objects. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Opening Power Top Remote Function Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE The remote keyless power top function can only be used transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, with the engine off. within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Key Fob NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Opening Power Top Remote Function: WARNING! (Continued) 1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional information. WARNING! Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: • Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. (Continued) • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. • When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation. • Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment. • Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw loPush and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitcated on the side of the Key Fob. ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to “Sentry Key®” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for further information. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the using a small screwdriver. battery observing its polarity. 2 Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of following conditions: the battery is a minimum of three years. • This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB • This device must accept any interference received, radios. including interference that may cause undesired operation. DOOR LOCKS NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from by the party responsible for compliance could void the inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door user’s authority to operate the equipment. handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 WARNING! (Continued) Driver’s Door Lock Handle WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into REVERSE gear, and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued) 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 3. Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxiWhen enabled, the door locks will lock automatically mately one second) to go back to the main screen when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). without storing the settings. To change the setting proceed as follows: NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor1. Briefly push the MENU button to enter the MENU dance with local laws. screen. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or DOWN button to highlight in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Own2. Push the UP “Auto Door Locks”. Push the MENU button, use er’s Manual on your DVD for further information. or DOWN buttons to turn setting ON the UP or OFF. Auto Door Locks 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the driver and passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Power Window Switches Auto-Down The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for approximately one THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 second, release, and the window will go down automati- To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle cally. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle. Liftgate Handle 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi- properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as tion. However, because the gas pressure drops with possible. temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your risk of harm from a deploying air bag: child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. shoulder belts properly. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Air Bags room to inflate. 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilbe injured. dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be up in a vehicle with a rear seat. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition Seat Belt Systems switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain and could cause a collision that includes you. This can on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. happen far away from home or on your own street. The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) (Continued) 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 2 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its the latch plate. stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the fully. folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Extender Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when shoulder belt. the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a anchor point. Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occudegrees to create a fold that begins immediately above pant, it must be removed. the latch plate. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • seating position (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to First Row remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Second Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating Row positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is • N/A — Not Applicable installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor feature. Children 12 years old and under should always If the passenger seating position is equipped with an be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the WARNING! seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearonly the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably facing child restraint. wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ with a rear seat. Driver N/A ALR Center N/A N/A Passenger ALR ALR 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) • Seat Belt Pretenioners Air Bag System Components • Seat Belt Buckle Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Track Position Sensors system components: Advanced Front Air Bags • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat • Air Bag Warning Light belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Steering Wheel and Column Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The • Instrument Panel passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Knee Impact Bolsters words “SRS AIRBAG” and “AIRBAG” are embossed on • Advanced Front Air Bags the air bag covers. • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Supplemental Knee Air Bag • Front and Side Impact Sensors 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags. driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air sensors or other system components. bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, Advanced Front Air Bag Features The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Knee Impact Bolsters The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the hanced protection during a frontal impact by working driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Front Air Bags. Air Bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or structure. “AIRBAG.” When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the (Continued) 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment Front Air Bags deploy. of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior that is appropriate for the size of the child. trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air immediately after deployment. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or the air bag system. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inor all of the following may occur: structions for cleaning. • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricbags will not be in place to protect you. tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by WARNING! contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot significantly within a few days, or if you have any protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, blistering, see your doctor immediately. If A Deployment Occurs (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING! (Continued) seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Unlock the doors automatically. but they will open during air bag deployment. System Reset Procedure • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an Depending on the nature of the event the left and right authorized dealer immediately. turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel cluster, Enhanced Accident Response System may both be blinking and will continue to blink until the In the event of an impact, if the communication network ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. In order to remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine follow the system reset procedure. whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or reset procedure must be performed again in order to be it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. successful. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds Air Bag Warning Light for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to The air bags must be ready to inflate for your the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The the OFF position the air bag system is not on and the air diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. bags will not inflate. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine Maintaining Your Air Bag System related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint WARNING! Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec• Modifications to any part of the air bag system tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag could cause it to fail when you need it. You could system immediately. be injured if the air bag system is not there to (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of (Continued) seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the vehicle or the EDR. accelerator and/or brake pedal Child Restraints • How fast the vehicle was traveling Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all These data can help provide a better understanding of times, including babies and children. the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a province, requires that small children ride in proper non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosthe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- ecuted for ignoring it. sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Yes, all may be removed Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Locating Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle tions to attach a tether anchor. anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack that seating position. For some second row seats, you in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved turer’s instructions. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by move it to its rear-most position to make room for the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt child seat. You may also move the front seat forward path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) to allow more room for the child seat. in any direction. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes Yes No Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be removed Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you position. For some second row seats, you may need to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the “click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the (Continued) 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Defroster Air Bag Warning Light unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a able. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .82 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Lowering The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 䡵 BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION . .90 ▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure . . . . .84 ▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .86 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication Overview — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ EZ Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .111 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .104 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .111 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .115 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .108 ▫ To Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ To Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . . .121 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Rear Park Assist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .121 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .123 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .124 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .126 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 3 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition power convertible top switch is located on the overhead switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position. console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver • The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” side button, is used to close the power top. in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more information. Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top. Manual Open Power Convertible Top Switch For manual open, push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present. close mode. Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “MaintainRaising The Power Top ing Your Vehicle” for information. Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top. Manual Close For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and hold again for full close position. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. WARNING! The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision. Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary. 1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed. 2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode). 3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position. 4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 5. Release the OPEN button. NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity. 6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time. closed position. 7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top Wind Stop begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. button. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operaAt the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open MIRRORS position. This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- Inside Day/Night Mirror ful. The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top on the view through the rear window. Function will be functional. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare the windshield). from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Power Mirror Switches 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. Spotter Mirror — If Equipped Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Spotter Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Folding Mirrors Sun Visors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication Overview nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the — If Equipped voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent” Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per- type. sonal telematic system enabling you to use communicaWith this system you can also play your favorite music tion and entertainment applications expressly designed stored on USB device and select tracks and playback for use in the car. modes with both voice commands or buttons on the The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is steering wheel. equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules media player, and it is preset for future installation of subject to the following two conditions: additional services. • This device may not cause harmful interference. The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc- • This device must accept all interference received, intion display messages, gives you the possibility of intercluding interference that may cause undesired operaacting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile tion. phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multifunction display. Please refer to the Fiat Blue & Me Radio The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice Supplement for further information. recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as required by current laws. The Hands-Free Kit Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connection between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit installed on your car. To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit Steering Wheel Hands Free Buttons gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device 1 — Mute/ESC 3 — Phone Hang Up 4 — Voice Recognition (VR) does not feature Voice Recognition. You can also interact 2 — Phone/Main with your mobile phone manually and visually using the 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with • To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the voice recognition, you have to simply pair your buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. With voice recognition, you can perform system funcBluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as with the system. “keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword, Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once. it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice NOTE: recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE&ME™. • During the mobile phone pairing procedure, BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped All the system functions are available within the with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving, then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden- you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. tification Number (PIN). When you are traveling, you can interact with • Once your phone is paired, you have the option to BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free or voice commands relevant only to phone functions kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK) and the media player. list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to To activate settings when travelling you can only use answer a call and also to answer another incoming voice commands. phone call. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 • Conference Call — You can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation (with Contact Calling By Voice — You can call a contact in Bluetooth® phones supporting this option). your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning • Call Waiting — While engaged in a phone conversathrough the entries on the multifunction display. (To tion, you can receive notification of another incoming use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook). switch between two ongoing phone conversations. (Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatDigit Dialing By Voice — You can dial a phone ible mobile phones). number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed. • Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — You can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by To Call The SMS Text Sender — Call directly the last pushing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering SMS text sender or the sender of a message received wheel. and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox. After pairing and connecting your phone with the To Answer A Call — You can answer an incoming call BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by by pushing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering wheel. The hands-free kit enables the following operations: • • • • 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio Message reader functions are managed by the control output of a phone conversation is heard through your car buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™ voice commands. sound speakers. Message Reader The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following operations: The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts • To display an indicator on the instrument panel that you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired display the sender’s number/name and will ask you and connected to the BLUE&ME™ system. It does not whether to read the text of the message to you. provide access to messages that were received before the device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The • To manage the list of SMS texts received on your message reader will also interpret many abbreviations BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone. and emoticons contained in the SMS text. • To read the messages received and stored. Messages NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text can be read multiple times. message reader function or automatic phonebook transfer via Bluetooth®. For further information on the list of • To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. compatible mobile phones go to http:// www.fiatusa.com, find the SUPPORT section near the bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth® logo. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 • To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using • iPod® Player — See dedicated paragraph under Media Player Functions. the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. The media player enables the following operations: The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read • Digital Audio Playback — You can play all your abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I digital audio files (.mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac) or play a love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-) customized playlist (.m3u or .wpl format). will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write • Audio File Selection By Category — You can play all SMS texts. audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or Media Player genre. With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play the digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply • Playback Options — While playing tracks you can select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track, connecting it to the USB port located in the center console Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track. of the car. A second USB port, used for charging only, is located in the glovebox. In this way, while you are driving you can play your favorite music collections. 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The media player does not support audio files compressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected audio files. Non-supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored. • To use the media player, you have to simply connect (directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to the center console USB port. After turning the ignition key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At the end of this operation you can surf the complete library and scroll its categories as required using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car sound system. WARNING! • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. • The use of any handheld device while driving is not recommended. Use voice-operated systems when possible. Follow all applicable laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Keep the Owner’s Manual in the car: when kept in the car, the Owner’s Manual will be available for you and other users unfamiliar with the system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the Owner’s Manual and read its instructions and safety information carefully. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the lever, lean back until the desired position has been seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the reached, and release the lever. desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Height Adjuster 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry its locked position once the rear passengers are seated. feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the Memory Feature release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, Both front seats have a memory feature, which can dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward operate in two ways: to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: EZ Entry Feature After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright. Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only Memory: EZ Entry Lever After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1. Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area. Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealership. 3 WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Adjustment Button Rear Head Restraints The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and position, see your authorized dealership immediately. 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occu- TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD pant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting To open the hood, two latches must be released. Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing. 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. Adjustment Button Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the 3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left hood, near the center, and raise the hood. side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. 3 Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Prop Rod 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop LIGHTS rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. Multifunction Lever CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 High Beams With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. Flash-To-Pass Headlight Operation You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released. NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Parking Lights Running Lights will be deactivated. To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRL. If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Turn Signals Turn Signal Operation Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond- the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to returned to a straight position. indicate the operation of the turn signal. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Lane Change Assist Deactivation Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash and hold it for more than two seconds. three times then automatically turn off. Interior Lights Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay The interior light switches are located in the overhead When this feature is selected the driver can choose to console. The interior lights can be set to three different have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). Activation Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK the right from its center position and the lights are always position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by position, and the lights are turned on and off when the 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side a maximum of 210 seconds. of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 on the left light. second timer is activated. CAUTION! Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. Interior Light Timing (Center Position) • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) There are four different modes of operation that can be • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated in this position: activated. • When one door is opened a three minute timer is NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved activated. into the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. instrument panel, just below the radio. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Fog Light Switch 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off There are five different modes of operation for the front This is the normal position of the wiper lever. windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be Intermittent Wiper Operation raised or lowered to access these modes: Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. High Speed Windshield Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Manual High Speed/Mist Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. Front Windshield Washer Operation Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. Rear Wiper Operation NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. 3 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). Electronic Speed Control Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the ElecWARNING! (Continued) tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control You could lose control and have an accident. Always system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic leave the system OFF when you are not using it. Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Set A Desired Speed To Activate Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise operate at the selected speed. Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed turned off when not in use. and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. To Deactivate WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally (Continued) A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or U.S. Speed (mph) turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph memory. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will button and release. Resume can be used at any speed continue to increase until the button is released, then above 25 mph (40 km/h). the new set speed will be established. To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inthe button results in an increase of 1 km/h. crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. To Increase Speed The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underthe new set speed will be established. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to decrease until the button is released, then The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected the new set speed will be established. speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Accelerate For Passing U.S. Speed (mph) Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills button results in a decrease of 1 mph. The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will vehicle set speed. continue to decrease until the button is released, then NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains the new set speed will be established. speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed transmission is placed into REVERSE. Control. Rear Park Assist Sensors WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible system indicates the nearest obstacle. indications of the distance between the rear fascia/ The minimum height of a detectable obstacle correbumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuSystem Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this ver. system and recommendations. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Rear Park Assist Warning Display If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent. The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides audible and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission further information. is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated. Rear Park Assist Display The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses will turn ON indicating the system status. between the tones are directly proportional to the disThe system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succesarcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 distance and location relative to the vehicle. in (30 cm) away. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view Failure Sensor or System failures INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information). Visual signal (EVIC) • Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist Display” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (where provided). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further muted. information. The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicondition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor maneuvers parallel to walls). is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the turned off automatically. instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System display. Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash Failure Indications The warning icon is illuminated and a message soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Park Assist System Usage Precautions not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be system operating properly. displayed in the instrument cluster. NOTE: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. CAUTION! • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To Open Pinch Protect Feature Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurswitch a second time and hold for approximately one rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with second to completely close the sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. To Close 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. Sun Shade — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or Manual Sun Shade closed. To open the sun shade push the tab and move the ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS shade to a full open position. There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located in the floor console, for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 CAUTION! Power Outlet Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position. • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION! (Continued) • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED This is located on the center console, in front of the cup holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use. WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats. cated on the floor console between the front seats. CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it. 3 Glove Compartment Latch CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. Folded Rear Seats Rear Seat Release Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 3 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .139 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO . . . . . . . . . . .141 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .143 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ▫ EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 䡵 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 4 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .204 ▫ Suggestions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 ▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped. . . . . .194 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .205 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .206 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .207 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .209 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 — — — — — — Side Vent Multifunction Lever – Light Control Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer Central Air Vents Storage Compartment/Radio 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Rear Defrost Button 10 — Hazard Button 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Windows Control 13 14 15 16 — — — — Storage Compartment Shift Lever Sport Button Horn/Driver Airbag 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO 4 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to 1. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. approximately one minute and then remain continuously Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsenates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. CAUTION! 2. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. 3. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn problem diagnosed and corrected. signal on. NOTE: NOTE: • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a rapid rate. 4. Electronic Stability Control Malfunction Indicator Light (ESC) Activation/ The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the This light will turn on for four to eight seconds headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on sound. during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” When the ignition switch is first turned to in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to further information. eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb 5. Air Bag Warning Light check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, This indicator will illuminate when the park if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt lights or headlights are turned on. reminder light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 7. High Beam Indicator 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped This light shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part soon as possible. of an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which monitors the emissions and engine conCAUTION! trol system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions control system. It also could affect fuel economy and testing the light will come on when the ignition is first driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 converter damage and power loss will soon occur. seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the Immediate service is required. bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly. 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you (Continued) 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! (Continued) drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 10. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 11. Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service. 12. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on. 13. Rear Defrost Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 14. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 16. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge/ECO Index Gauge Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available. • Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at. • Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo usage. • ECO Index Gauge: The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy. The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5 (0 = low, 5 = high). A higher “ECO” index indicates a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy. A lower “ECO” index indicates frequent accelerations/decelerations and will decrease your fuel economy. The index is recalculated approximately every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style during the current trip. NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are: • Traffic conditions • Trip duration • Temperature (engine and ambient) 17. Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) The EVIC features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.” 19. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to System Pressure Cap” paragraph. make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or 20. Tachometer that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions must be reset at zero. Per Minute (RPM x 1000). NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic 21. Speedometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument Information Center (EVIC) Display Area cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center been driven. (EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.” U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the 22. Low Fuel Light correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair gallon (3.8L), this light will turn on, and remain technician should leave the odometer reading the same on until fuel is added. as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, WARNING! (Continued) 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 23. Generic Warning Light while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Failure. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.” 24. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped 26. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light will turn on when the electronic This light informs you of a problem with the speed control is ON. For further information, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underproblem is detected, the light will come on standing Your Instrument Panel.” while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition 25. Charging System Light key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the This light shows the status of the electrical charg- shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light ing system. The light should come on when the should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 28. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve27. Oil Pressure Warning Light hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for light should turn on momentarily when the engine is service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the Do In Emergencies” for further information. vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feaThis light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 • Door Ajar • Speed Limiter — If Equipped EVIC Displays 2. Amber Telltales • Ice Risk • Fuel Cut Off • Fuel Cut Off Failed • Hill Holder Failed • Oil Change Request • Check Lights • Vehicle Lock 3. Electronic Speed Control Active Instrument Cluster 1. Red Telltales (Left Bank) • Hood Ajar • Low Oil Pressure • Electronic Throttle Control 4. Amber Telltales • Generic Warning Light • Glow Plug Light • Park Sensor Failed • Stop Lamp Failed 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5. Red Telltales (Right Bank) • Trunk Ajar • Transmission Failure • Battery Charge Indicator 6. Exceeded Speed Limiter 7. Shift Up or Down Indicators 8. Gear Indicator button to scroll downPush and release the DOWN ward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed. NOTE: UP and DOWN buttons activate different functions according to the following situations: • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. • To increase or decrease values during settings. NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a EVIC. Push and hold the MENU button (approximately few seconds. one second) to return to the main screen. EVIC Control Buttons button to scroll upward Push and release the UP through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu • Autoclose • Units The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a • Language cycle. Push and release the UP and DOWN buttons to access the different options and settings (setup). • Buzzer Volume The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU • Button Volume button. A single push on the UP or DOWN buttons will scroll through the setup menu options. The menu • Daylights (D.R.L.) includes the following functions: • Hill Start • Speed Beep • Tire Pressure • Trip B Data • Unlock Driver Door First • Set Time • Unlock All Doors • Set Date • Exit Menu • See Radio • Speed Display 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select Submenu the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select or DOWN button (by the main menu option to set. 4. Push and release the UP single pushes) to select the new setting for this or DOWN button (by 2. Push and release the UP submenu option. single pushes) to select the new setting. 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected new setting and go back to the main menu option submenu option. previously selected. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub- 6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). menu 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display Change Engine Oil Indicator System the first submenu option. Change Engine Oil or DOWN button (by Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 2. Push and release the UP single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will options. flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time). Trip Button The TRIP button, located on the right steering column 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously described values. start the engine.) 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times • A short button push displays the different values. within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. • A long button push resets the system and then starts a new trip. 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL New Trip Start Of Trip Procedure To reset: With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset. • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system Exit Trip manually. • When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without system. storing settings. NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Trip Functions • Average speed B Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new • Travel time B (driving time) trip). NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset. • Range • Trip distance A Values Displayed • Average consumption Range • Instantaneous consumption This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases: • Average speed A • Travel time A (driving time) “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Trip distance B • Average consumption • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running. 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving Travel Time style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Trip planning must take into account the above notes. Features) Distance Traveled Dimmer This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable Average Economy of detecting environmental light conditions and adjustThis value shows the approximate average consumption ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly. since the last reset. NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may Instant Economy change while travelling following an event that causes This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.). display if the car is parked with the engine running. Average Speed To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: or DOWN This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func- 1. Push and release the UP set the required brightness level. tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. button to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU release the MENU button to display the presently set or DOWN (approximately one second) to go back to the main activation speed. Pushing the UP buttons selects the speed limit. Push and release screen without storing settings. the MENU button to confirm selection. Speed Beep (Speed Limit) With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by (mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the 5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is pushed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To set limit is exceeded. increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, push and hold To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly push1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the ing the button when you approach the required setting. • Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU or DOWN button to 2. Push and release the UP button (approximately one second) to go back to the select Speed Beep. Push and release the MENU main screen without storing the settings. or DOWN button, push and release the UP buttons to select Speed Limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off). Main MENU. 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to select Trip B data. Push and release the UP or 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will buttons to turn ON or OFF DOWN flash on the display. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back button. “Off” will 2. Push and release the DOWN to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU flash on the display. button (approximately one second) to go back to the 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back main screen without storing the settings. to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU Set Time (Clock) button (approximately one second) to go back to the This function may be used to set the clock through two main screen without storing the settings. submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.” Trip B Data (Trip B On) Proceed as follows: Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN buttons to highlight release the UP For further information, see “Trip Computer.” Set Time — Push and release the MENU button. For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows: 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to navigate the two sub-menu items. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 3. Select the required option and then push and release the MENU button. 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly push and release the MENU button and “hours” will flash on the display. 5. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for 6. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “minutes” will flash on the display. 7. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach the required setting. • Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the “Time” sub-function. • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push and release the MENU button. The previously set display format will flash on the display. • Push and release the UP select “24h” or “12h.” or DOWN button to When you have selected the required settings, briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the NOTE: Time, Mode sub-menu screen, or push and hold the • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to or DOWN button is pushed. the main screen without storing the settings. time the UP Push and hold the button to increase/decrease the 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting. This function may be used to set the date (day - month year). NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit or DOWN button is pushed. each time the UP To change, the date proceed as follows: Push and hold the UP or DOWN button to 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting or DOWN button to highlight by briefly pushing the button when you approach the release the UP Date, push and release the MENU button and Year required setting. will begin to flash. • Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU setting. button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button and Set Date “month” will flash on the display. 4. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN See Radio (Repeat Audio Information) button for With this function active, the EVIC display shows information relevant to the sound system. 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “day” • Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning will flash on the display. activation or AutoStore. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 • CD audio, CD MP3: track number. Speed Display To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h). info displaying, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display or Down button to highlight feature, proceed as follows: release the UP See Radio and push and release the MENU button. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight release the UP 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for Speed Display. Push and release the MENU button setting. to enter the Speed Display MENU. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back or DOWN button to to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU 2. Push and release the UP select display deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/ button (approximately one second) to go back to the h.” main screen without storing the settings. If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU “BLUE&ME™ Radio Supplement” for further informabutton (approximately one second) to go back to the tion. main screen. 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Autoclose Units (Set Units) With this function active, the doors will automatically This function may be used to set the measurement unit in lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel (24 km/h). Economy, and Tire Pressure.” To change the setting proceed as follows: To set the required unit, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push the 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight Autoclose. or DOWN button to highlight UP release the UP Push and release the MENU button to enter AutoUnits. Push and release the MENU button to enter close MENU. Units MENU. 2. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN navigate the three sub-menus. button to 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU and release the MENU button. button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly push 1. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for and release the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km” setting. will appear on the display (according to the previous 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to setting). the sub-menu. or DOWN button for 5. Push and release the UP 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly setting. push and release the MENU button. Either “°F” or 6. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to “°C” will appear on the display (according to the the sub-menu. previous setting). or DOWN button for 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly 4. Push and release the UP setting. push and release the MENU button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to (according to the previous setting). the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu. If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will When you have made the required settings, briefly push be displayed in “mpg.” and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. storing the settings. 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Language (Selecting The Language) Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning The messages can be displayed in the following lan- Buzzer Volume) guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish, With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian. one of eight volume levels. To set the required language, proceed as follows: To adjust the volume proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP Language. Push and release the MENU button to or DOWN button, then highrelease the UP enter the Language MENU. light the Buzzer Volume. Push and release the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU. 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting. 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. main screen without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment) Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R. This function may be used to adjust the volume of the Indication) or This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group beep accompanying the buttons. MENU, UP DOWN buttons can be adjusted according to 8 Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. syslevels. tem. To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and This function may be used to activate / deactivate the or DOWN button to highlight Daytime Running Lamps. release the UP the Buzzer Volume, push and release the MENU Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: button. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for or DOWN button to highlight release the Up setting. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Push and release the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or button (approximately one second) to go back to the “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous main screen without storing the settings. setting). 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for To set the required unit, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the two sub-menus. 4. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the button 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to (approximately one second) to go back to the main navigate the two sub-menus. screen without storing the settings. 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) and release the MENU button. This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator or DOWN button for in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.” 4. Push and release the UP setting. • Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy, the sub-menu. when operating in base driving mode. When you have made the required settings, briefly push • Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu disabled. screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Hill Start Assist Tire Pressure This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal. This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location. Proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight release the UP Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: the Tire Pressure. Push and release the MENU button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight release the UP 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to scroll the Hill Start Assist. Push and release the MENU through all four tire pressure value locations. button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for to the menu screen, or push and hold the button setting. (approximately one second) to go back to the main 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back screen. to the menu screen, or push and hold the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Lock Exit Menu When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Drivers Door is selected, you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, push and release the SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All Doors” appears. This function closes the initial menu screen. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the main screen. button to return to the first Push and release the menu option (Speed Beep). Push and release the button to return to the last menu option (Daylights). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully. Suggestions Road Safety Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g. store stations) before beginning to drive. Reception Conditions RAB Radio Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard. Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far away from the broadcaster. 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds, i.e. sirens, horns, etc. Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises. Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface. CDs • Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards. • Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs. • After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to prevent them from being damaged. • Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperatures or moisture for long periods. • Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens. The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs • Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed, could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these malfunctions or damage to the player. guidelines: • Only use branded CDs. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 • The use of original CD media is required for the best • The CD player is capable of reading most compression quality audio production. Correct operation is not systems currently in use, following the development of these systems, the reading of all compression formats guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were is not guaranteed. not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity above 650 Mb. Technical Specifications • Do not use commercially available protective sheets The complete system consists of: for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one speaker in each of the front doors. • If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD • Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in each of the front pillars. player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being • Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker copied is often shown in very small letters or is in each of the rear side panels. difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be, for example, “COPY CONTROL,” “COPY PRO- • Antenna on the car roof. TECTED,” “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A • Radio with CD/MP3 player. PC/MAC.” 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped): • Antenna on the car roof. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers. • Radio with CD/MP3 player. • Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars. With BEATS Premium Audio system (if equipped): • Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each • A subwoofer in the trunk on the left-hand side panel. of the rear side panels. • An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel. Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON TUNER GENERAL FUNCTIONS On Off AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection MODE Short button push Short button push Short repeated button push UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 BUTTON A-B-C MEDIA BUTTON (Mute/Pause Button) AUDIO GENERAL FUNCTIONS Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present) source selection MODE Short repeated button push Short repeated button push GENERAL FUNCTIONS Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) MODE Short button push Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/ right balance (BALANCE), front/ rear balance (FADER) Menu activation: short button push or Adjustment type selection: push Adjustment of values: push or 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON (Information Button) MENU GENERAL FUNCTIONS Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist, Folder information (if available) in CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so equipped); Toggles RBDS information in FM Advanced functions adjustment +Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS Radio Station Search: • Automatic Search • Manual Search MODE Menu activation: short button push or Adjustment type selection: push Adjustment of values: push or Push + button: volume increase Push – button: volume decrease MODE Automatic search: push buttons or (long push for fast forward) Manual search: push buttons or (long push for fast forward) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 BUTTON 12345 RADIO FUNCTIONS Current radio station storing Stored station recall BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS CD ejection Previous/next track play CD track fast forward/rewind Previous/next folder play (for CD-MP3) MODE Long button push for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Short button push for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively MODE Short button push Short button push Long button push Short button push 4 or or or 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information CD Section The radio offers the following functions: • Track selection (forward/backward) Radio Section • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • PLL tuning with FM/AM bands • CD Display function: display of track number and on mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since start of the track • RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) • Automatic/manual station tuning • FM Multipath detector • Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40 stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC) • Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW CAUTION! On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could damage the speakers. CD/MP3 Section • SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG) • Automatic Stereo/Mono selection • Folder selection (previous/next) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 • Track selection (forward/backward) Functions And Adjustments • Fast forward/rewind through tracks Turning The Car Radio On (ON/OFF) button • MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3- The car radio comes on when the TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the is pushed briefly. track, name of the file When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it • Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW had been set higher when previously used. Audio Section Turning The Car Radio Off • Mute/pause function Push the (ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off. • Soft mute function Selecting The Radio Functions • Loudness function By pushing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, the • Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped) following audio sources can be selected cyclically: • Separate bass/treble tone adjustment • Right/left channel balancing • Front/rear fader • AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped) 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When the volume level is changed using the dedicated By briefly pushing the MEDIA button, the CD audio controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the volume is adjusted to the new level selected. source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded). Audio Adjustment Volume Adjustment Selecting The CD Function To adjust the volume, push the buttons +Vol or –Vol to The functions that can be selected from the audio menu change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/ increase/decrease the volume. SATELLITE. Mute/Pause Function Push the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio Push the button briefly to activate the MUTE func- functions. After the AUDIO button is first pushed, the tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the display will show the Bass level value for the source wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will (in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode). show the wording “FM Bass +2”). Push the button again to deactivate the MUTE Use the buttons or to scroll through the Menu function. The volume will gradually increase until it functions. To change the setting of the selected funcreaches the previously set level. or buttons. tion, use the The current status of the selected function appears on the display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 The functions managed by the Audio Menu are: Tone Adjustment • BASS (Bass adjustment) Proceed as follows: • MIDRANGE (Midrange adjustment) 1. Push the AUDIO button. • TREBLE (Treble adjustment) or button to select “Bass,” “Mid2. Push the range” or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu. • BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment) • FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment) 3. Push the or button to increase/decrease the bass or treble adjustments. • LOUDNESS — if equipped (Loudness function By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will activation/deactivation) change progressively. By pushing them down longer, • EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection the levels will change quickly. of factory equalization adjustments) Balance Adjustment • USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equal- Proceed as follows: ization adjustment) 1. Push the AUDIO button. or 2. Push the AUDIO menu. button to set “Balance” in the 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL button to increase the sound from the By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will 3. Push the left speakers or the button to increase the sound change progressively. By pushing them down longer, from the right speakers. the levels will change quickly. By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs change progressively. By pushing them down longer, at the same level. the levels will change quickly. Loudness Function — If Equipped Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs The Loudness function improves the volume of the at the same level. sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass Fader Adjustment Proceed as follows: and treble. To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loudness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the 1. Push the AUDIO button. function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few or button to set “Fader” in the seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness 2. Push the AUDIO menu. Off”. 3. Push the button to increase the sound coming button to increase from the rear speakers or the the sound coming from the front speakers. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If Equipped When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording “EQ” lights up. The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu. User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped To set a personalized equalizer adjustment: 1. Push the AUDIO button. 2. Use the or buttons to set EQ function. or buttons to select ⬙EQ User.⬙ To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button to select 3. Use one of the adjustments: 4. Push the MENU button to start adjusting equalizer. • “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can 5. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which be changed by the user) each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be • “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music or buttons. The selected adjusted by using the sound) bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using or buttons. • “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop music sound) 6. To store the setting, push the MENU or AUDIO • “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound) buttons. 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Menu • SiriusXM Telephone Number MENU Button Functions • System Reset Push the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu • Speed Volume function. • On Volume Limit or buttons to scroll through the menu Use the Push the MENU button again to exit the Menu function. functions. To change the setting of the selected funcor buttons. tion, use the Speed Volume Function — If Equipped The current status of the selected function appears on the This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the display. speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level The functions managed by the Menu are: inside the passenger compartment. To activate/ deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording • Speech Volume “Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the • Aux Audio Offset current status of the function: • Radio Off • Off: function deactivated • Sat ID • Low: function activated (low sensitivity) • High: function activated (high sensitivity) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 • “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off. The This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the volume level can be between 0 and 40. maximum volume limit when turning the radio on. or to change the setting. Use the buttons The display shows the function status: NOTE: • “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on the volume level will be: • Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the activation/deactivation of the function and not the – If the volume level is equal to or higher than the minimum or maximum volume value. maximum value, the radio will come on at the maximum volume. • If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be – If the volume level is between the minimum and adjusted between the minimum and the maximum maximum values, the radio will come on at the level. same volume as before it was switched off. Radio Off Function – If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value, the radio will come on at the This function makes it possible to set the radio switching off mode by choosing between two methods. minimum volume. On Volume Limit 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The chosen mode appears on the display: on the display. At the end of the operation, the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed. • “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connection with the ignition key; the radio is turned automatically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP Radio position. (Tuner) Introduction • “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen- When the car radio is turned on, the last function that dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3, a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has AUX) is activated. been turned to the STOP position. To select the Radio function when another audio source is System Reset Function being listened to, briefly push the TUNER button. This function is used to restore all settings to the factory Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will values. The options are: show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of • NO — No restore intervention. the selected radio station, the frequency band selected (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1). • YES — The default parameters will be restored. During such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Frequency Band Selection • 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC) With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep- band and then briefly push the corresponding preset tion band. button (from 1 to 5). Each time the button is pressed the following bands are By pushing the preset button for more than two seconds, selected cyclically: the tuned station will be stored. Pushing the A-B-C button will change between the preset memory group in • AM, FM or SAT (if equipped) the current frequency band. Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings Automatic Tuning on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station Briefly push the or button to start the automatic selected on the respective frequency band. tuning search for the next station that can be received Preset Buttons in the selected direction. The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the If the or button is pushed for longer, the rapid following pre-selections: search is started. When the button is released, the • 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC) tuner will stop on the next station that can be received. • 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB) 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band. Select the desired frequency band and then push briefly or button to start the search in and repeatedly the or button is pushed the desired direction. If the longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released. Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono. SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game, every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The biggest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at www.siriusxm.com/customeragreement. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pushing the or buttons. The Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in or buttons will tune that program type. Pushing to only the stations in that program type. Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Pushing the or buttons until ⬙All⬙ is displayed Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the will allow normal tuning to all stations. selected Set-up Menu function. The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock, Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian, receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, EnterSiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health, Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are Religion, Traffic/Weather. correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able at www.siriusxm.com. to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL your service, either call the number listed on the display Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A or visit the provider online. Sirius Radio CAUTION! Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles. When a radio needs to be replaced, the Dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number contains 12 digits. The following are instructions for retrieving the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks radios: of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Condi- are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription tions available at www.siriusxm.com/ will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and customeragreement. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only will not be active when installed in the customer’s available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 vehicle. contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. www.siriusxm.com. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped CD Player Selection The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. To activate the CD player built into the equipment, proceed as follows: CD Player Introduction • Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first track will start to play. Or • If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and then briefly push the MEDIA button to select the “CD” function mode. The last track listened to will start to play. This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using “Functions and Adjustments” chapter. good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed possible. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatiTo load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not motorized loading system, which will position it cor- resume playing until the ⬙MEDIA⬙ button is pushed to select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last rectly. source prior to CD mode. The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off. remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source Possible Error Messages listened to before being switched off, will be activated. If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is “CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc displayed for the whole time required for the radio to error.” read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio The CD will then be ejected and the audio source automatically starts playing the first track. activated before the CD mode selection will be heard. button with the radio turned on, to Push the A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejecfunctions are over. At the end, with the CD mode tion, the last audio source listened to before playing activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc the CD will be heard. error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected. CD Loading/Ejecting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Display Information Track Fast Forward/Rewind When the CD player is operating, information will ap- Keep the button pushed down to fast forward the button pushed down to pear on the display with the following meaning: selected track and keep the fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will • “Track 5” indicates the CD track number. stop once the button is released. • “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the Pause Function track (if the relevant Menu function is activated). To pause the CD player, push the button. The wordTrack Selection ing “CD Pause” appears on the display. Briefly push the button to play the previous CD To resume listening to the track, push the button track and the button to play the next track. The again. tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa. CD MP3 Player If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, button, starts the track again from the pushing the beginning. In this case, if you want to play the button twice consecuprevious track, push the tively. Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 player. NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or “.wma” files with a different extension will not be In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also reproduced. enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format. • The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: 44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s). good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible. MP3 Mode • Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced. The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks NOTE: The track names must not include the following (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected. brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure that the names of the files do not contain these characters; The specifications and operating conditions for playing if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks MP3 files are the following: involved. • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs with ISO standard 9660. If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the Selection Of Next/Previous Folder CD button pressed for more than two seconds. Push the button to select a next folder or the button to select the previous folder. The display NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc will show the number of the folder. the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session selected after the last folder and vice versa. from the point where it was interrupted. If no other folder/track is selected in the next two Display Information seconds, the first track on the new folder will be played. ID3–Tag Information Display After the last track in a folder is played, the next folder In addition to the information relating to the time will be played. elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also Structure Of The Folders capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to The radio with MP3 player: Title Track, Artist and Author. When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen • Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain MP3 format files. to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this information has not been recorded for the track played, the text ⬙UNKNOWN⬙ will be displayed for that field. 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in CD Player sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single The CD Does Not Play: level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the The CD is dirty. Clean the CD. level of the main folders. The CD is scratched. Try using another CD. Troubleshooting General The CD Can Not Be Loaded: Sound Volume Low A CD is already loaded. Press the the CD. button and remove The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F” (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output MP3 File Reading power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files: adjustment is equal to R+9. The CD is scratched or dirty. Source Can Not Be Selected The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to Displayed: be listened to. In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information. 4 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be USB/AUX Port plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center 1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack console. 2 — USB Connector Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability. 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom access the switches. of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/enter an item while scrolling through menu. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Radio Operation Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for further information. will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE will tune to the next preset station that you have proTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following grammed in the radio preset button. precautions: CD Player Operation 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface. track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchIf you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. ing the disc. 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES or anti-static sprays. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the too high. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular turned down or off during mobile phone operation. disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) CLIMATE CONTROLS oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known The air conditioning and heating system is designed to good disc before considering disc player service. make you comfortable in all types of weather. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 1. Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. 2. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. 3. Recirculation Control Manual Temperature Control (MTC) Rotate this control to change the system between recirThe Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be dials and one inner push knob. used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se- for maximum airflow to the rear. • Bi-Level lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. Air is directed through the panel and floor • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for outlets. Defrost. • Floor • The A/C can be deselected manually without disAir is directed through the floor outlets with a turbing the mode control selection. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 4. Mode Control • Mix Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. MAX A/C For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the occupant to select a comfort settings. windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. • The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience. 5. A/C Button • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light The ATC system automatically maintains the interior will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is comfort level desired by the occupant. engaged. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. A/C Button Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 3. Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. 4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) through the system in any mode you select. The blower 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir- up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the culation automatically. Push and release to select. Per- blower control down button. forming this function will cause the ATC to switch The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan “Automatic Operation” for more information. will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 are selected. This allows the front occupants to control and side window demist outlets. When the defrost butthe volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the ton is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windAUTO mode. shield and side window defrosting and defogging. PerThe operator can also select the direction of the airflow forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into by selecting one of the following positions. manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the 5. Mix Mode climate system will return the previous setting. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side 7. Floor Mode window demister outlets. This setting works best Air is directed through the floor outlets with a in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the small amount flowing through the defrost and windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort side window demister outlets. Performing this function while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. mode. 8. Panel Mode 6. Front Defrost Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct Push and release to change the current airflow airflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates switch into manual mode. when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. for maximum airflow to the rear. 12. Recirculation Control Button 9. Bi-Level Push and release to change the current setting. The Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. indicator illuminates when ON. Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators NOTE: When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not the ATC to switch into manual mode. proceed to this mode due to fogging risk. 10. Temperature Control Down Button Climate Control Functions Provides temperature down control. Push the button for Air Conditioning (A/C) cooler temperature settings. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator NOTE: If the temperature is lowered until ⬙Lo⬙ is dis- to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning played, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and am- temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air bient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C this button is selected. Push the button a second time to button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. deactivate the A/C system. NOTE: • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows. • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed. Recirculation Control NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to Automatic Operation recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION 1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature control button. Recirculation mode should only be used Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when when on. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information system to maintain by adjusting the temperature conCenter (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is disin this section of the manual. played, the system will achieve and automatically Manual Operation maintain that comfort level. The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation connot necessary to change the settings. You will experi- trol. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by system to function automatically. adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at NOTE: a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for allows the front occupants to control the volume of air cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide The operator can also select the direction of the airflow comfort as quickly as possible. by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric operation and Recirculation control can also be manually units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable selected in Manual operation. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher suggested control settings for various weather condiblower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on tions. the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode. Window Fogging Operating Tips Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Summer Operation Winter Operation NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operation, the air conditioning system performance may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition. When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Operating Tips Chart 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .223 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .223 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .226 . . .229 . . .231 . . .231 . . .231 . . .233 . . .238 5 220 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .248 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .248 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .251 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .247 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .263 STARTING AND OPERATING 221 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .268 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .281 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .271 ▫ Enhanced System — If Equipped . . . . . ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 ▫ Premium TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine . . ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo . . . ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .280 . . . . .282 . . . . .285 . . . . .288 . . . . .288 . . . . .292 . . . . .292 . . . . .293 . . . . .293 . . . . .294 . . . . .294 . . . . .294 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .299 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 STARTING AND OPERATING 223 STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Automatic Transmission — If Equipped access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK. in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting operate power windows, other controls, or move NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externallypowered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. CAUTION! Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. Extended Park Starting NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts. STARTING AND OPERATING 225 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the If Engine Fails To Start ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the WARNING! Extended Park Starting procedure. Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing the procedure. serious personal injury. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING After Starting MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will Five-Speed Manual Transmission decrease as the engine warms up. Turbocharger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear. For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accelerations, fifth gear is recommended. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Shift Lever REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (appedal. proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to ring under the knob and, at the same time move the stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be produced, the pause length should be increased. gearshift lever to the right and then backward. 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Recommended Shift Speeds • Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is mov- To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following ing, can result in transmission damage. table. • During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission. Engine Size 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph (km/h) Acceleration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 Rate Accel 14 23 29 (23) (37) (47) Cruise 12 18 25 (19) (29) (40) 4 to 5 38 (61) 32 (52) STARTING AND OPERATING 229 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened. prolong engine life. Downshifting CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Key Ignition Park Interlock Six-Speed Automatic Transmission This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission hundred miles (kilometers). out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position Shift Lever (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, shifting between these gears. and NEUTRAL. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to NEUTRAL into another gear range. move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. This is especially important when the engine is cold. Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. WARNING! 5 • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 235 CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the STARTING AND OPERATING 237 range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: ing. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may 1. Stop the vehicle. be modified depending on engine coolant temperature. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. ture has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument service is required. cluster. AUTOSTICK NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever providing manual shift control, giving you more control rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed. and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, • The transmission will automatically downshift as the city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will and many other situations. display the current gear. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever • The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. • You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful STARTING AND OPERATING 239 in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice. • The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES because the transmission will not shift automatically. Acceleration • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipAutoStick is engaged. pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs fault or overheat condition is detected. when there is a difference in the surface traction under To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the the front (driving) wheels. DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road DRIVING THROUGH WATER surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To Driving through water more than a few inches/ reduce this possibility, the following precautions should centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. be observed: Traction STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through (Continued) 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 WARNING! Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEERING - ASSIST OFF⬙ message is displayed on the EVIC screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle NOTE: needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and POWER STEERING” message is displayed on the EVIC during parking maneuvers. screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for condition in the power steering system. Once driving service. conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely. Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine response. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal. 3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate. STARTING AND OPERATING 247 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 5 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode. 248 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”. Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. STARTING AND OPERATING 249 The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in REVERSE gear). The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under WARNING! various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the Always remember the driver is responsible for brak- desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and coming the vehicle. pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the Disabling/Enabling HSA brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be the oversteer or understeer condition. done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unappropriate for the steering wheel position. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than tion. appropriate for the steering wheel position. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 5 ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission) NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column (Manual Transmission Only). 254 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. WARNING! (Continued) reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And mode by pushing the switch. Once the situation requiring ESC OFF Indicator Light ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the switch. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR WARNING! (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature dehas been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power (Continued) 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as NOTE: possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the each time the ignition switch is turned ON. tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also will be ON even if it was turned off previously. flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accelThe ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially driving to the prevailing road conditions. off. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE: Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 259 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) STARTING AND OPERATING 261 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. STARTING AND OPERATING 265 NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. “Vehicle Loading” in this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE: cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the ing table shows examples on how to calculate total amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 650 lbs [295 kg]). purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • For the following example, the combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity calculated in step 4. (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 267 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable response or over responsiveness in the steering. ride. NOTE: Tire Inflation Pressures • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the erratic and unpredictable steering response. driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door. vehicle to drift left or right. 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING At least once a month: 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual wall. judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with inflated. temperature changes. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter. ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire which could damage the valve stem. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original WARNING! equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Repair Tire Types If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped meets the following criteria: All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary • The tire has not been driven on when flat. between different all season tires. All season tires can be • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on (sidewall damage is not repairable). the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 5 274 STARTING AND OPERATING While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tires — If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and mode. wheel equivalent in look and function to the original STARTING AND OPERATING 275 equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time. compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on WARNING! the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited 80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be T, S = Temporary Spare Tire replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare WARNING! tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Full Size Spare — If Equipped Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced. ping. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. 5 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire 278 STARTING AND OPERATING These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is tenance schedule is highly recommended. worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. WARNING! Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. • Distance driven. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for STARTING AND OPERATING 279 wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. (Continued) 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage: • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Install on Front Tires. • Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended. WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued) • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed. Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. STARTING AND OPERATING 283 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning (20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire natural pressure loss through the tire. 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. STARTING AND OPERATING 285 • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Base System while adjusting your tire pressure. This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes instrument cluster. the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levstopping ability. els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain Module. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure. Light. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Receiver Module. the tire. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the pressure value. The system will automatically update TPM sensors. and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting once the updated tire pressures have been received. The that affects radio wave signals. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. • Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Check TPMS Warnings • Using tire chains on the vehicle. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact • This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a spare wheel and tire assembly. chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and • The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure then remain on solid. monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. • Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare • If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnPressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The will still turn ON due to the low tire. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes • However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Enhanced System — If Equipped The TPMS consists of the following components: When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM • Receiver module system, the driver can view text messages showing the • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, to the instrument panel features section of the owners which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information manual. Center (EVIC) Premium TPM System • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the readings to the receiver module. four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Warning Low Tire Indicator Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Service TPM System Message 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. The EVIC will also display a ⬙Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the ⬙Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still STARTING AND OPERATING 291 shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message is displayed. Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “Service TPM System” message and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on • The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replacesolid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Presment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor. sure Monitoring System” message and dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. • If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning Once you repair or replace the original road tire and limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addiPressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire a different color. pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. NOTE: 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when us• This device may not cause harmful interference. ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso• This device must accept any interference received, line having a posted octane number of 87 including interference that may cause undesired op- as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher eration. octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines. following licenses: United States Canada MRXC4W4MA4 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single) While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all emis- ering service for the vehicle. sion regulations, provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using Reformulated Gasoline high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner having a posted octane number of 87 as burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum perfor- Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spemance and fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imgasoline or higher is recommended. prove air quality. FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo While operating on gasoline with an octane number of The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide ima cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Operate in a lean mode. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. • Poor engine performance. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline MMT In Gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is does not have the negative effects of Methanol. STARTING AND OPERATING 295 blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Fuel System Cautions blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without CAUTION! MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline performance: without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, formance and damage the emissions control systherefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether tem. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition and California reformulated gasoline. malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to Materials Added To Fuel overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune All gasoline sold in the United States is required to or malfunctioning and may require immediate sercontain effective detergent additives. Use of additional vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service detergents or other additives is not needed under normal assistance. conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the (Continued) fuel. 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 5 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. Fuel Filler Cap CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities (Continued) 298 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire. NOTE: • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. • Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. STARTING AND OPERATING 299 turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a the problem will turn the MIL off. malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ TRAILER TOWING sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Dolly Tow Front Rear ALL On Trailer Manual Transmission Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK Automatic Transmission NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground). Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL. CAUTION! DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .303 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .303 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .305 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .306 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .309 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 . . . . . .316 . . . . . .317 . . . . . .318 . . . . . .320 . . . . . .321 . . . . . .327 . . . . . .329 . . . . . .329 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 6 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .337 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time (Continued) TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat. 6 Tire Service Kit Components Tire Service Kit Location 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit) 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button (4) once to symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Using The Deflation Button position for air pump operation only. Use the Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Selecting Sealant Mode Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to when selecting this mode. assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” your original equipment vehicle dealer. (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material 6 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. (Continued) (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 WARNING! (Continued) • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position. 4. Set the parking brake. (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the from the fitting at the end of the hose. deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat 6 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire. valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the available. Make sure the engine is running before parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. turning ON the Tire Service Kit. • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes: Sealant Hose (6): • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 mended inflation pressure before continuing. psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: empty. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruindicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side ment panel. 6 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.” (D) Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). CAUTION! WARNING! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 (E) After Driving: If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air opening. Mode position. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. mended inflation pressure before continuing. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 stem. Volt outlet. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in Gauge (3). the vehicle. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire the vehicle further. Call for assistance. service center. 6 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing. panel after the tire has been repaired. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Push the bottle into the sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the ment”. bottle is locked into place. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its using the Tire Service Kit. storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). vehicle. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle. 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure tightening. that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. properly calibrated torque wrench. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m) Steel Wheels Only 75 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m) Aluminum Wheels Only M12 x 1.25 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 17 mm 6 Wheel Mounting Surface 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 WARNING! (Continued) under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under the front driver’s seat. 6 Jack And Jack-Handle Location 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you cargo area. to pull the tire out from under the vehicle. 1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area. Spare Tire Removal Lowering/Raising Spare Tire Winch Access Plug WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch. 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. 6 Spare Tire 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn Off the ignition. Retainer Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 6 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Remove center cap. Jack Warning Label NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the “Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and operation. CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. Center Cap Removal NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into 1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the the notched part of the center cap. driver’s seat. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). 6 Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Jack Location WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. 7. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. 6 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the WARNING! wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vewheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have the places provided. them checked with a torque wrench by your autho11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have rized dealership or service station. the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. 10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the WARNING! bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle. A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 6 Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Bolt 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Road Wheel 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Install the four wheel bolts with the cone shaped end 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are bolts. properly seated against the wheel. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 5. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. properly seated against the wheel. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, Spare Tire Stowage follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. Reverse instructions of the spare removal section. Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed. CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 6 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. Battery Posts 1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap) 2 — Negative (-) Post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking tab and pull upward on the cover. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 6 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged spected at your authorized dealer. battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE 6 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pushing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine. NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying at the bottom edge of the cover. 6 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever in. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. Shift Lever Override Access Hole WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Rear Front ALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD 6 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. Automatic Transmission • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN in order to move the vehicle. position. CAUTION! CAUTION! • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Manual Transmission ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. the communication network remains intact, and the • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followthe ground). ing functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. 6 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or System Reset Procedure until the ignition key is turned off. After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel the battery has power or until the ignition key is cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned removed. off. • Unlock the doors automatically. After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. 6 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .346 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .347 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .374 7 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .374 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Convertible Top Care — If Equipped . . . . . . .383 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .395 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 ▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .393 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .396 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Battery — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 — Battery 6 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 7 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light ready for testing. (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if not proceed to the I/M station. your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully following: illuminated until you place the ignition in the off 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do position or start the engine. This means that your not crank or start the engine. vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself. vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you. running. WARNING! REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 7 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION! (Continued) The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 350 hours of engine run time or one year, whichever comes first. Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Engine Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil (Continued) For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12991. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Engine (SAE Grade) SAE 5W-30 engine oil recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature This symbol means that the oil has starting and vehicle fuel economy. been certified by the American You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomPetroleum Institute (API). The mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommanufacturer only recommends mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes API Certified engine oils. are followed. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom- are followed. mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil Materials Added To Engine Oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adeconomy. dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- performance may be impaired by supplemental addiber should not be used. tives. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE Grade) 7 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filters and are recommended. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper station or governmental agency for advice on how and maintenance intervals. where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters WARNING! Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection WARNING! (Continued) The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid (Continued) splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning A/C Air Filter service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. WARNING! NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. 7 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage lower right of center console. Perform the following the front retaining tab and remove the cover. procedure to replace the filter: 1. Remove the Torx® screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover. Console Closeout Panel Torx® Screw Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure 4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing. the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators. 7 Air Filter Cover Screw Locations A/C Air Filter 5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 6. Install the passenger side console closeout. Body Lubrication Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the from a dry windshield or rear window. liftgate glass. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. 7 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Pivot Cap 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder. 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into Exhaust System place. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Adding Washer Fluid system. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind- or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur- have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damther information. aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep WARNING! into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the Commercially available windshield washer solvents exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age: portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in damage. motion. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. 7 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Coolant Checks flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 MS.90032). months (before the onset of freezing weather, where MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard tain the proper level of protection against freezing acMS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 NOTE: • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING! • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check recovery tank. 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is norCoolant Level mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapormethod for determining that the coolant level is ad- ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be beIf an examination of your engine compartment shows no tween the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be RANGE”. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising. sions. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System for leaks. In order to assure brake system performance, all brake • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically. minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals. protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. WARNING! • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally (Continued) 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and both the brake system and the clutch release system. The possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in reduce braking capacity in an emergency. one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require Brake Master Cylinder fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does when performing under hood services, or immediately if not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a the “Brake Warning Light” is on. result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Mainfluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the taining Your Vehicle” for further information. brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. WARNING! (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. Manual Transmission — If Equipped Lubricant Selection Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately. Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in Automatic Transmission — If Equipped “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Selection Of Lubricant Fluid Level Check It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain of the hole. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Fluid Level Check any special additives in the transmission. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle. hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with What Causes Corrosion? clear water. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle. lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug The most common causes are: and Tar Remover to remove. • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • Stone and gravel impact. Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Special Care MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not Interior Care required to maintain the original condition. Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. WARNING! Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are directly on the mirror. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Instrument Panel Cover must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive protectants or other products which may cause undesircleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the rag. low glare surface. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Seat Belt Maintenance WARNING! (Continued) Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to Convertible Top Care — If Equipped wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present. buckles do not work properly. CAUTION! WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt (Continued) 7 Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips. (Continued) 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior. Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment. Washing Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred. CAUTION! Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION! Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area. Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further suggestions. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. (Continued) 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. Fuse Panel Cavity 1 2 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 F32 Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 3 F53 5 Amp Tan Description Right Low Beam Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights Instrument Panel Node MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Cavity 4 5 Vehicle Fuse Number F38 F36 Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 6 7 8 9 10 F43 F48 F13 F50 F51 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 11 12 F37 F49 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan 13 14 F31 F47 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow Description Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Car Radio, Climate Control System Bi-Directional Washer Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling Airbag Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light, Clutch Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor Ignition, Climate Control Driver Power Window 7 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. Front Distribution Unit The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F11 F14 F15 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange – – – – – – Mini Fuse – – – – – – – – – 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue Description Body Controller Audio Amplifier Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan - Single Speed Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Powertrain Horn Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) High Beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter 7 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F16 F17 F17 F18 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F30 F82 F83 F84 Maxi Fuse – – – – – – – – – – – – 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow – Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 25 Amp Clear 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue – – 10 Amp Red Description Transmission Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Powertrain Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Heated Seats – If Equipped Fuel Pump Powertrain Anti-Lock Brake Valves Stability Control System Fog Lamps Sunroof/Convertible Top Cooling Pump – If Equipped Transmission MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity F85 F87 F90 Maxi Fuse 30 Amp Green – – Mini Fuse – 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan Description Rear Defroster Rear Defroster Heated Mirrors – If Equipped • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes days, you may want to take steps to preserve your in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will battery. ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. VEHICLE STORAGE NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Courtesy Lamp Bulb Number C5W W5W Exterior Bulbs Front Low and High Beam Headlamp Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Side Direction Lamps Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Bulb Number HIR2LL W21/5W H11LL W3W WY21W WY5W PY21W W3W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Rear Tail and Stop Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps Bulb Number P21/5W W16W W5W LED (See Authorized dealer) NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric housing. conditions change to allow the condensation to change 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 2. Open the wheel housing access door. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. Front Fog Lamps To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. Wheel Housing Access Door MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand 1. Open the liftgate. access to side marker lamp. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove assembly. the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 7 5. Reinstall the wheel liner. Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from 3. Disconnect the electric connector. the lamp housing. 4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing 5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and rethem slightly and turning counter-clockwise. place it. 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 6. Close the back cap locking it properly. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. 7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws. 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Cooling System 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission U.S. 10.5 Gallons Metric 40 Liters 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters 4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters 7 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil – 1.4L Engine Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Spark Plugs – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fuel Selection – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) 7 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use Berulub FR 43. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level. Check windshield washer fluid level. Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, and fill as needed. Check function of all interior and exterior lights. Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter. Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect brake pads, rotors, and hoses. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Check and adjust hand brake. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings. Replace as necessary. Inspect parking brake function. Adjust as necessary. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 Maintenance Chart Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin air filter. Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Replace spark plugs (1.4L Engine). ** Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine). ** 2 48,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 X X 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Replace the timing belt. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .413 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .414 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 9 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1-888-242-6342 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT Canada Customer Center They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who 9 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related have any questions about the service contract, call the concerns. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in WARRANTY INFORMATION individual problems between you, your authorized See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the dealer, and the manufacturer. DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. 9 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE You can also obtain other information about motor NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada Service Manuals If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot- DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests TIRE QUALITY GRADES and a complete list of all tools and equipment. The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Owner’s Manuals specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac- your vehicle. quaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte- All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities requirements in addition to these grades. and safety tips. Treadwear • Call toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart 9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, teristics and climate. representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under Traction Grades controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforpassenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor mance. Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test WARNING! wheel, than the minimum required by law. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 420 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 76, 143 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .354 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 357 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 209, 356 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 397 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 374, 376 INDEX 421 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 376 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 371 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393 Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 392 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .18 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 400 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .397 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 353, 402 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 296 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 10 422 INDEX Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .143, 347 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .67 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .65 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .61 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .57 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .203 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397, 398 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 INDEX 423 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366, 370 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369, 370 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 208, 209 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .116 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .155 Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 10 424 INDEX New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .347 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 296 Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293, 398 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350, 397 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 353 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352, 398 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Enhanced Accident Response Feature. . . . . . . . .49, 339 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 296 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 363 Exterior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 392 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 INDEX 425 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 143 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .398 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 143 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297, 299 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293, 397 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 294 Gauges Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 10 426 INDEX Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 143 Hazard Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 321 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 INDEX 427 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 392 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 106 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 76, 143 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .143 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 143 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 108 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .143 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 10 428 INDEX Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .347 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 374 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 400 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350, 397, 398 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397, 398 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 INDEX 429 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352, 397 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 353 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 414 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .264 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .128 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 206 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 10 430 INDEX Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Power Convertible Top Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .204 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Seat Belt Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .38 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .38 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 INDEX 431 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 76 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29, 32 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 108, 143 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 276 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 143 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 10 432 INDEX Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .204 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .39 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .263, 264 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 268, 415 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 264 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 268 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 INDEX 433 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .299 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 240 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 374 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .18 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 143 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .203 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 391 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .143 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 413 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 10 434 INDEX Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 114 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 127 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 208, 209 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 114 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2015 FIAT 500 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 15FF500-126-AD Fourth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500